2005 Chevrolet Monte Carlo Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
“Do Not let this happen.”
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has manual seats, lift the bar located
under the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to
where you want it and release the bar. Try to move
the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked
in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Six-Way Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the front seats. To adjust the
seat do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control to the front or the rear.
If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat. Turn the knob
toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar
support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to
decrease lumbar support.
• Raise or lower the seat by sliding the control
up or down.
• Raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion
by sliding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion
by sliding the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
option, the switches that
control seat temperature
are located on the
center console.
There are two settings, LO and HI.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback in place. Pull up on the lever without
pushing on the seatback and the seatback will move
forward.
Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature.
Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature.
To turn this feature off, move the switch to the center
position.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Seatback Latches
There is a latch located
on the lower back of the
front seat that enables
the front seatback to
fold forward.
This allows more room for entry and exit of rear seat
passengers.
To fold the locked seatback forward, push the seatback
toward the rear and lift the latch. The seatback will
fold forward. The latch must be down for the seat to
work properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger seat is designed to make it
easy to get into and out of the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the latch on the back of the right front seat and
tilt the seatback forward. The seat can be pushed
and slid forward to allow someone to get into or out
of the rear seat area.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Return the seatback upright to lock it. Slide the seat
fully rearward to lock it into its original position.
3. The front passenger must try to slide the entire
seat back and forth to make sure the seat is
locked into place.
Easy Entry Seat
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can fold either side
of the seatback down for more cargo space. Make
sure the front seat is not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all the way.
To lower the rear seatback, pull forward on the seat tab
located on the outboard side of the seatback cushion
and fold the seatback down. This will allow you
direct access to the trunk.
To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
{CAUTION:
2. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
in position.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Ensure that the safety belts are properly stowed
over the seatback in all three positions.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Driver Position
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see
release button on the buckle is positioned so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides
may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is how
to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback
and interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide. If the child is
sitting in a rear seat outside position, see Rear
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has
straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield
may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped
shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a
flat pad which rests low against the child’s body.
A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that
are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings
up or to the side.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here is why:
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You will find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors for all three rear seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating the lower anchorages for this
child restraint system, each seating position with
the LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point
in the seat where the seatback meets the seat
cushion.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
for the LATCH System
Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
Here is why:
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver and another frontal airbag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
airbag for the driver.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver it
will say AIR BAG on the airbag covering on the side
of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt, even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
The side impact airbag for the driver is
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the driver’s side
of your vehicle. It is not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle, and should
not lean on the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph
(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
Your vehicle may or may not have a driver’s side impact
side impact airbag is designed to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes involving the driver’s door. A
side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. A driver’s side impact airbag is not designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or
rear impacts, because inflation would not likely help
the occupant.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. A side impact airbag would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
that airbag. Airbags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s side
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both the frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with a driver’s
side impact airbag, the airbag modules are located in
the seatback closest to the driver’s door.
impact airbag.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with a driver’s side impact
airbag, the side of the seatback closest to the driver’s
door will be hot. The parts of the bag that come
into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to
touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag module
and seatback for the driver’s side impact airbag. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
{CAUTION:
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key is used for the
ignition, the driver’s door
and all other locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If you need a new key, contact your dealer for
assistance. In an emergency, contact Chevrolet
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command
page 2-32 for more information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
Using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, you can
lock and unlock your
doors or release your trunk
from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
LOCK: Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors.
UNLOCK: Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock
the driver’s door and turn on the interior lamps.
See “Illumination on Remote Activation” later in this
section for more details. Pause for about one second,
then press UNLOCK again to unlock the
passenger door.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L (Remote Alarm): Press this button to activate an
alarm. The ignition must be in OFF or ACC for the
remote alarm to work. When you press the remote
button, the headlamps will flash, the horn will sound
repeatedly and your interior lamps will turn on attracting
attention if you need it. The alarm will continue until
one of the following occurs:
Transmitter Verification
This feature provides feedback that a command
has been received by the vehicle, if your key fob
has been programmed to Mode 3: Full, see FOB
HORN (Remote Audible Verification) under Vehicle
The headlamps and back-up lamps will flash on every
lock command and on the first unlock command.
The horn will also sound once for every lock and
twice for the first unlock command. Silent operation and
other options may be selected for this feature.
• The remote alarm button is pressed a second time,
• the vehicle’s ignition is turned to ON or
• an alarm period of 110 seconds has elapsed.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time the remote unlock is received and
the alarm has been previously activated, three flashes
from the headlamps will be seen and three chirps will be
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred
page 2-14.
V (Trunk Release): Press the button to release
the trunk.
Operating the remote keyless entry transmitter may
interact with the content theft-deterrent system, if your
vehicle has this option. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-14.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illumination on Remote Activation
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
The interior lamps will come on when either the
UNLOCK, the trunk release or the remote alarm button
is pressed. The interior lamps will remain on for
40 seconds or until the ignition is turned to ON or LOCK
is pressed. Locking the doors with the power door
locks will also cause the lamps to turn off. If a door is
opened during the 40 second period, the interior
lamps will remain on while the door is open.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
If you prefer, you can complete this procedure yourself.
information.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the
back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the front
and back.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown
on the transmitter. Use type CR2032 battery or
equivalent.
4. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
halves are together tightly so water won’t get in.
5. Resynchronize and then test the transmitter.
Resynchronization
After you have changed the battery in your transmitter,
you will need to resynchronize the transmitter. To
do this, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
transmitter at the same time and hold for about
seven seconds or until one horn chirp is heard.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use your key or the optional
remote keyless entry transmitter. From the inside, use
the manual or power door locks.
Door Locks
To manually unlock the driver’s door from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To manually lock the driver’s door from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lock
lever forward. To unlock a door, push the lever rearward.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
A power door lock switch
is located on each front
door above the armrest.
Programmable automatic power door locks are a
standard feature that is intended to provide enhanced
security and convenience by automatically locking
and unlocking doors.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Mode 2: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P); no automatic door unlock.
Mode 3: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P); automatic unlock for the driver’s
door only when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
Press the top of the switch to unlock both doors, or
press the bottom of the switch to lock both doors.
Mode 4: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P); automatic all-door unlock
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches will
be disabled. You must use your remote keyless entry
transmitter or your key to unlock the doors while
the system is armed.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it left
the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle
is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not change any previously programmed modes.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Trunk
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, this
feature stops the power door locks from locking while
the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
{CAUTION:
If a power lock switch is pressed while a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, both doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock. A chime will sound
continuously until both doors are closed.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lock
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key in
the lock and turn it. You can also press the car
symbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter.
Remote Trunk Release
You can also unlock the trunk from inside the vehicle.
Press the button located
below the exterior lamps
control on the underside of
the dashboard. The shift
lever must be in PARK (P)
for the remote trunk
release button to work.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch. This handle
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release
handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rear of
the switch and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the rear of the switch is pressed down all the
way, the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold
the front of the switch.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also move them from side to side. The visors
also have extenders that you can pull out for added
coverage.
Both doors have power window switches located on the
armrest. Press the front of the switch to raise the
window. Press the back of the switch to lower it. The
switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of the
windows when the ignition is in ON, ACC, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Open the cover on the top of the sun visor to expose
the vanity mirror.
If your vehicle has the lighted vanity mirrors, the lamps
come on when you open the cover.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key) or turns the ignition on with an
incorrect key. The horn will sound and the headlamps
and back-up lamps will flash for approximately
two minutes.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened
with the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you use the
key to open the trunk, the alarm will sound. The
power door lock switches are also disabled. You must
use your remote keyless entry transmitter or your key to
unlock the doors when the system is armed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, a light on the radio will flash.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the
trunk is open and the key is removed from the ignition.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The light on
the radio should come on and stay on. If you
are using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
door does not need to be open.
The light on the radio flashes quickly to let you know
when the system is ready to arm with the power
door lock switches. The light on the radio will stop
flashing and stay on when you press the bottom of the
power lock switch, to let you know the system is
arming. After all doors and the trunk are closed and
locked, the light on the radio will flash slowly to let you
know the system is armed.
3. Close all doors. The light on the radio will slowly
flash once the system is armed.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled and
the engine will not start.
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm when you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key
is not in the ignition. The light on the radio will turn on to
let you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the trunk are closed and locked, the light on the
radio will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you
know the system is armed.
During normal operation, the SECURITY message, on
the instrument panel cluster, will be displayed after
the key is turned to the ON ignition position. See
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The light on the radio will go off to let you know
the system is no longer armed.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message
flashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying to
restart the engine.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if
you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®
system is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock®
at this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
dealer for service.
The first time a remote UNLOCK command is received,
three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since
last arming.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the doors. The light on the radio will go
off to let you know the system is no longer armed.
In an emergency, contact Chevrolet Roadside
page 7-5 for more information.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
With the key in the ignition, you can turn the switch to
four positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
The ignition switch is
located on the instrument
panel, to the right of
the steering column.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
OFF: This position locks your steering column in a
vehicle with a manual transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature. You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to OFF.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
While the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow
you to operate your electrical accessories, such as
the radio.
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door
while the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the key is in
the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
ACC (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you
can operate your electrical accessories. With the key
in this position, the ignition and automatic transaxle
will unlock.
If the vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
certain features will continue to operate for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF
unless a door is opened.
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start the engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in ON while the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to
operate your electrical accessories and to display
some instrument panel cluster messages and
warning lights.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start or starts briefly but then stops
again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on
Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
temperature. When the engine starts, release the
key and the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START. Do this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
the key.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
your ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. In very
cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, hold your key
in START for about 10 seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the
normal starting procedure.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the diagonal
brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on
the console between the front seats.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
The above graphic is displayed on your instrument
panel cluster.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic transaxle
vehicles while you are in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
to protect driveline components from improper operation.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You must fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
while the ignition is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it
all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake
pedal pushed down and the shift lever button pressed
in. Release the shift lever button. Then move the
shift lever out of PARK (P). See Shifting Out of Park (P)
on page 2-26.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-25. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
page 4-28.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE X: This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you are:
• going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
{CAUTION:
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE X for higher speeds
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
until then.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE X.
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE X:
• When driving on hilly, winding roads
OVERDRIVE X instead of SECOND (2).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears
• When going down a steep hill
• When driving in non-highway scenarios
(i.e. city streets, etc.)
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than
THIRD (3) but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3).
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control
your speed as you go down steep mountain roads,
but then you would also want to use your brakes off
and on.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot,
the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released
position.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver’s door.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK (P).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal
with your left foot.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-36.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-25.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You must fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
page 2-20.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Then move
the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sure to press
the shift lever button.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal until the end
of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
{CAUTION:
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
If the vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever located at
the bottom of the mirror between the two lamps.
The lever is used to change the mirror from the day to
the night position. To reduce glare from headlamps
behind you while driving at night, pull the lever toward
you. To return the mirror to the day position, return
the lever to its original position.
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pull the
lever at the bottom of the mirror toward you (to the night
position). To return the mirror back to the day position,
push the lever away from you.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it
on and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror face. See your dealer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
about the services OnStar® provides.
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on
and off.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it
is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn the
automatic dimming feature off, press the center
button again.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System.
The vehicle may be equipped with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. Push the center button on the
bottom of the mirror to turn this feature on. The mirror
will darken gradually to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you. This may take a few moments. The mirror
will lighten whenever you shift to REVERSE (R).
Press the button located below the mirror, on the far
left, for up to three seconds to turn the automatic
dimming feature off and on. While turned on, this mirror
functions exactly like the automatic dimming mirror
described previously.
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on
and off.
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn
it on and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See
about the service OnStar® provides.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
The outside power mirror
controls are located near
the driver’s side window,
on the armrest.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Use the selector switch located above the
four-way control panel to choose either the left or right
outside mirror. Then press any of the four arrows
located on the control pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this option, the surface of both
outside mirrors will heat when you activate the rear
window defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.
Heated Outside Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, the surface of the
outside mirrors will heat when the rear window defogger
is activated.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
OnStar® Services
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
HomeLink® Transmitter
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is
lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free
wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in
the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also able
to listen and reply to your E-mail through your vehicle’s
audio system. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed
and released.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all
previous programming.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
Center Console Storage Area
The console has cupholders and a cassette tape
storage area. To open the console’s storage area, press
the latch located toward the front of the console lid on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
Rear Storage Area
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
If your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, there will
be two cupholders in the rear seat armrest. To
access them, pull down on the cloth strap located
toward the top of your center back seat cushion.
Storage Areas
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a convenience net located on the
back wall of the trunk.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store those in
the trunk as far forward as possible.
Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open/Express: To activate the express-open feature,
press the switch rearward two times. Press the
switch forward to stop movement of the sunroof.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof and a sunshade.
Vent: The sunroof also has a vent feature. It can be
activated from the closed sunroof position by pressing
the switch once rearward. To close, push and hold
the sunroof switch forward. When using this feature, the
sunshade should be fully opened in the rear position.
The switch is located on
the overhead console if
the vehicle is equipped
with a Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The sunshade can be opened manually by sliding
it rearward, or automatically, by opening the power
sunroof. You will need to close the sunshade manually
by sliding it forward.
Close: To close the sunroof, push the switch forward
and hold until the sunroof motor stops, or release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
DIC Version Shown
If the vehicle is not equipped with a DIC, the sunroof
switch is located on the roof panel headliner.
The switch works only when the ignition is in ACC, ON
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Return to Original Factory Settings
(Available for All)
Vehicle Personalization
Some of the convenience features can be reset or
customized to perform according to your preference.
The features you can program depend upon the options
that came with your vehicle. The following list shows
features that can be reset or customized along with
those options.
• Exit Vehicle Customization Mode
Programming Mode
To reset or customize the features, first enter the
vehicle customization main menu. To enter the main
menu, do the following:
• Settings (Available for All)
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON. The radio must
be off.
• Engine Oil Life System Reset (Available for All)
• Low Tire Pressure Reset
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP knob on the
radio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS
is displayed.
• Delayed Headlamp Illumination (Available for All)
• Automatic Door Lock and Unlock (Available for All)
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows to
scroll through each available feature on your
main menu.
• Remote Visual Verification (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
• Remote Audible Verification (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
4. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons to scroll
through the lower menu. An asterisk (*) will
appear next to the item that is the current setting.
• Content Theft Operation (Available with Content
Theft System)
The following information shows how to reset or
customize features after entering the main menu.
• Trunk Jamb (Available with Content Theft System)
SETTINGS (Display Current Settings)
• Horn Chirp On Timer (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
This displays all current settings.
• Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
(Available with Remote Keyless Entry)
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL LIFE (Engine Oil Life
System Reset)
TIRE MON (Tire Inflation Monitor Reset)
This feature allows you to reset the tire pressure
page 5-59. To clear the LOW TIRE PRESSURE
light from the instrument panel cluster and reset the low
tire pressure monitor, do the following:
This feature allows you to reset the engine oil life
system after an oil change. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-22. Be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
system at any time other than when the oil has
been changed.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until TIRE MON appears on the display.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
page 5-18 for more information.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
3. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will
be displayed for one second.
To clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light from the
instrument panel cluster and reset the oil life system,
do the following:
The low tire pressure monitor is now reset. You can
either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until OIL LIFE appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will then be displayed.
3. Press the TUNE DISP knob to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will
be displayed for one second.
The CHANGE ENGINE OIL light is now reset. You can
either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
LT DELAY (Delayed Headlamp
Illumination)
This feature allows the vehicle’s headlamps and parking
lamps to stay on for a fixed amount of time after you
exit the vehicle, or for them to turn off immediately.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF
AUTOLOCK (Automatic Door Lock and
Unlock)
Mode 2: 30 SEC
Mode 3: 60 SEC
With the ignition in ON and the vehicle’s doors closed,
this feature allows for the vehicle doors to automatically
lock and unlock when the driver shifts the vehicle’s
transaxle into and out of PARK (P), or to turn the
feature off.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 2. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until LT DELAY appears on the display.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Mode 2: LCK ONLY – Automatic door lock on/automatic
door unlock off.
Mode 3: DRVR UNL – Automatic door lock
on/automatic door unlock on (driver’s door only).
Mode 4: ALL UNL – Automatic door lock on/automatic
door unlock on.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 4. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
FOB LIGHT (Remote Visual Verification)
This feature allows the exterior lights to flash when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock or
unlock the vehicle, or to program no verification.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until AUTOLOCK appears on the display.
Programmable Modes
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Mode 1: OFF
Mode 2: ON – One flash for each remote lock/two
flashes for each remote unlock.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 2. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB LIGHT appears on the display.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
FOB HORN (Remote Audible
Verification)
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
This feature allows the horn to chirp when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock or unlock
the vehicle, or to program no verification.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time a remote UNLOCK command
is received, three flashes will be seen and three horn
chirps heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred
page 2-14.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF
Mode 2: PARTIAL – One chirp for each remote LOCK
command/no chirp for remote UNLOCK command.
Mode 3: FULL – One chirp for each remote LOCK
command/two chirps for the first remote UNLOCK
command.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 2. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
ALARM (Content Theft Operation)
This feature allows the content theft-deterrent system to
be turned on or off.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB HORN appears on the display.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ALRM OFF
Mode 2: ALRM ON
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which your
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until ALARM appears on the display.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time a remote UNLOCK command is
received, three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 2. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until TRNKJAMB appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
TRNKJAMB (Trunk Jamb)
This feature allows the content theft system trunk lock
sensor to be disabled or enabled.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: TRNK OFF
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
Mode 2: TRNK ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
CHIRP (Horn Chirp Timer)
This feature allows you to choose between short or long
horn chirp sounds when the remote keyless entry
transmitter is used.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: SHORT
Mode 2: LONG
ORIG. SET (Return to the Original
Settings)
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 1. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
This feature allows you to return all customization
feature settings back to their original factory settings. To
reset, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until CHIRP appears on the display.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until ORIG. SET appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. SET ALL will appear.
3. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will
be displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
The original factory settings are now reset. You can
either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOB PROG (Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter Programming)
EXIT (Exit Feature Customization
Mode)
This feature allows you to match the remote keyless
entry transmitter to your vehicle. To match the
transmitter, do the following:
This feature allows you to exit the vehicle customization
programming. To exit, do the following:
• Scroll until EXIT appears on the display.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB PROG appears on the display.
• Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify the exit.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. BEGIN will be displayed.
3. Press the TUNE DISP button to start programming.
When the message PUSH FOB flashes, press and
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for 15 seconds. A
chime will be heard to verify the transmitter is
learned.
4. Repeat Step 3 for each additional transmitter.
The transmitter is programmed now. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:
A. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See “Instrument Panel
page 5-97.
I. Remote Trunk Release. See “Remote Trunk
page 3-6.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
L. Steering Wheel Cruise Control (If Equipped).
on page 3-23.
page 3-14.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
to lock the wheel in place.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever located on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
• Turn Signal and Lane-Change Signals
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a
turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
• Windshield Wipers
• Windshield Washer
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the
For information on the exterior lamps, see “Exterior
Lamps” later in this section.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If you leave either one of your turn signals on and drive
more than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), a chime
will sound to alert you.
With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position, pull
the lever toward you momentarily to switch to
high-beam, (to signal you are going to pass).
If the headlamps are on, they will return to low-beam
when the lever is released.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change your headlamps from low beams to high
beams, or from high to low, pull the multifunction lever
all the way toward you. Then release it.
This feature operates even if the headlamps are off.
While the high beams
are on, this light will
appear on the instrument
panel cluster.
This light works only while the key is in ON. The fog
lamps (if equipped) are not illuminated when the
high beams are on.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF: To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
Windshield Wipers
The five marks between OFF and LO are delay settings.
For a longer delay between wiping cycles, turn the
band downward. For a shorter delay between wiping
cycles turn the band upward.
LO (Low Speed): Turn the band upward to LO for
steady wiping at a low speed.
HI (High Speed): Turn the band upward to HI for
steady wiping at high speed.
MIST: Turn the band downward to MIST for a single
wiping cycle. Hold the band at this setting until the
windshield wipers start, then release it. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If additional cycles
are needed, hold the band on MIST longer.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
The windshield wipers will operate when the ignition is
in ACC or ON.
WIPER: To operate the windshield wipers, turn the
band labeled WIPER, located on the multifunction lever,
upward or downward.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload. If your blades
become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. See
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-58
for more information.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle
with the windshield washer symbol and the word PUSH
on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will run for several sweeps and
then either stop or return to your preset speed. The
ignition key must be in ACC or ON for this to work. See
United States
Canada
When you are low on washer fluid, the LOW WASHER
FLUID message will be illuminated in the message
center for 60 seconds. When the ignition is turned off,
this message will appear again for three seconds
as a reminder that the fluid level is low.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Until the fluid tank is refilled, every time you start your
vehicle, the LOW WASHER FLUID message will be
illuminated in the message center for 60 seconds.
Be sure to check the fluid level and refill the tank
right away.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is equipped with cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This
can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (optional) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn the cruise control back on.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Setting Cruise Control
3. Press SET located on your steering wheel and
release it.
{CAUTION:
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press RES (Resume) on
your steering wheel.
You’ll go right back up to
your chosen speed
1. Push the CRUISE
ON/OFF button located
on the steering
wheel to turn the cruise
control on.
and stay there.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
will slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press SET on the steering wheel, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
• Press ACC (Accelerate) on the steering wheel. Hold
it there until you get up to the speed you want and
then release the button. To increase your speed
in very small amounts, press ACC briefly and then
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you set
the cruise control speed by pressing SET on the
steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to cancel the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press CRUISE ON/OFF on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
• Press COAST on the steering wheel until you reach
the lower speed you want, then release it.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press COAST
on the steering wheel briefly. Each time you do this,
you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
Exterior Lamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has three positions:
Off: Push the control all the way in to turn off the
exterior lamps.
Parking Lamps: Pull the control out halfway to turn on
the parking lamps together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Headlamps: Pulling the control all the way out turns on
the headlamps together with the previously listed
lamps and lights. A warning chime will sound if you
open the driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave the area around your
vehicle. The feature is activated when the headlamps
are on due to the automatic headlamps control
feature later described in this section, and when the
ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then remain on
until the exterior lamps control is moved to the parking
lamps position or until either a 30 second or 60 second
lighting period has ended.
The DRL system’s automatic headlamp control will
make your low-beam headlamps come on at a reduced
brightness when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is ON,
• the exterior lamps control is OFF and
• the gearshift is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps,
at a reduced level of brightness, will be on. The
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t
be on. Your instrument panel and cluster won’t be lit
up either.
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch in
the parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayed
headlamps cycle will not occur.
To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change
the time of delay, see Vehicle Customization Settings
on page 3-93.
When it’s dark enough outside, your low-beam
headlamps will turn off and the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come on
with your headlamps will also come on.
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System
When it’s bright enough outside, your headlamps will go
off and your DRL will come on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps system when you need it.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamp
button is located on the
instrument panel, next
to the exterior lamp control
wheel, to the left of the
steering column.
The knob for the instrument panel light is located on the
exterior lamps control. Pull the knob out halfway and
then turn the knob clockwise to brighten or
counterclockwise to dim the lights.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually turn
these lamps on by turning the exterior lamps control
clockwise all the way to DOME.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror, can
be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
To turn the fog lamps on, press the FOG button. A light
will glow in the button to let you know that the fog
lamps are on. Press the FOG button again to turn the
fog lamps off.
The ignition must be in ON and your parking lamps
must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamps will go off while you change to high-beam
headlamps.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to
work. Immediately after both doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to
work until one of the following occurs:
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle may have the entry lighting feature. Your
courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• The ignition is moved to ON,
• the doors are locked or
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after
you close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t open
a door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.
• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
Illuminated entry includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly
dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay
time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to ON
or press the power door lock switch.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The vehicle’s ignition must be off for delayed exit
lighting to work.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unless
a door is opened.
When the key is removed, interior illumination will
activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:
Delayed Entry Lighting
• The ignition is moved to ON,
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
• the power door locks are activated or
• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parade Dimming
Battery Rundown Protection
The instrument panel has an added feature called
parade dimming. This feature prohibits the dimming of
your instrument panel displays during the daylight
while the headlamps are on so that you’ll still be able to
see the displays.
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case you accidentally leave on the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor
vanity lamps, trunk lamp or glove box lamps. If you leave
any of these lamps on, they will automatically turn off
after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps
won’t come back on again until you do the following:
Reading Lamps
• Turn the ignition on or
The reading lamps are located on the rearview mirror.
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps come
on when any door is opened. Press the button to turn
them on and off while the doors are closed.
• turn the exterior lamps control off, then on again.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn this lamp on by turning the exterior
lamp control clockwise to DOME.
Battery rundown protection will also work if the
headlamps are left on. After having been left on for
10 minutes, the headlamps and the parking lamps will
flash three times. They will remain on for one more
minute before turning off automatically.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
The knob for the instrument panel light is located on the
exterior lamps control. Pull the knob out halfway and
then turn the knob clockwise to brighten or
counterclockwise to dim the lights.
Your vehicle may have the entry lighting feature. Your
courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after
you close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t open
a door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually turn
these lamps on by turning the exterior lamps control
clockwise all the way to DOME.
Illuminated entry includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly
dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay
time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to ON
or press the power door lock switch.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror, can
be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unless
a door is opened.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn this lamp on by turning the exterior
lamp control clockwise to DOME.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the key is removed, interior illumination will
activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
• The ignition is ON,
• the power door locks are activated or
• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Immediately after both doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to work
until one of the following occurs:
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
• The ignition is ON,
• the doors are locked or
Parade Dimming
• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
The instrument panel has an added feature called
parade dimming. This feature prohibits the dimming of
your instrument panel displays during the daylight
while the headlamps are on so that you’ll still be able to
see the displays.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
Delayed Exit Lighting
Reading Lamps
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The reading lamps are located on the rearview mirror.
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps come
on when any door is opened. Press the button to turn
them on and off while the doors are closed.
The vehicle’s ignition must be off for delayed exit
lighting to work.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case you accidentally leave on the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor
vanity lamps, trunk lamp or glove box lamps. If you leave
any of these lamps on, they will automatically turn off
after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps
won’t come back on again until you do the following:
Your vehicle has a 12-volt outlet which can be used to
plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone, a compact disc player, etc.
It is located at the rear of
the console.
• Turn the ignition ON or
• turn the exterior lamps control off, then on again.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Battery rundown protection will also work if the
headlamps are left on. After having been left on for
10 minutes, the headlamps and the parking lamps will
flash three times. They will remain on for one more
minute before turning off automatically.
Lift the cover to access the outlet. When not using the
outlet, make sure the protective cover is in place.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter and ashtray
located on the console. The ashtray is removable
and has a cupholder and liner underneath. To remove
the ashtray, lift it up with the liner and pull it out.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the amperage rating.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element. When the lighter is ready it will pop out.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
Climate Controls
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
Dual Climate Control System
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
defrost, defog and ventilation for your vehicle.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode allows for approximately a
50/50 split of air to the instrument panel outlets and
to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield and side window outlets. In this mode, the
system will automatically select Outside Air.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
By positioning the right knob between two modes, a
combination of those two modes is selected.
It should be noted, that the air conditioning compressor
will be engaged unless the outside temperature is
40°F (4°C) or below. Recirculation cannot be selected
when in Floor Mode.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter, if
equipped, may need to be replaced. For more
You may have to set the instrument panel brightness
control to the highest setting during the day to see
the indicator lamp.
: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on. When this mode is on, outside
air will circulate throughout your vehicle. When the
button is pressed, an indicator light in the button will
come on to let you know that it is activated. The outside
air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot
be used with the recirculation mode.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with outside
air modes.
D or P (Temperature Control): Slide the levers
marked D (Driver) or P (Passenger) to increase or
decrease the temperature on the driver’s side or
the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
You may have to set the instrument panel brightness
control to the highest setting during the day to see
the indicator lamp.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light will come on to let you know that
the air conditioning has been activated.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
You may have to set the instrument panel brightness
control to the highest setting during the day to see
the indicator lamp.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air equally to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When you select this
mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is below 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.
5. Select the highest fan speeds.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs half of the air to
the windshield and side window vents and half to the
floor vents. In this mode, the system will automatically
force outside air into your vehicle. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
The air conditioning compressor will run automatically
in this setting, unless the outside temperature is
below 40°F (4°C).
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inside of
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the knob located below or to the side of the outlet,
to change the direction of the air flow.
<: The rear window defogger will turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the button is pressed.
If turned on again, the defogger will run for the
same amount of time. The defogger can also be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside your vehicle more
effectively.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter, if equipped, may need to replaced. For
more information, see Passenger Compartment Air
on page 6-4.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment particulate air filter. It is located
underneath the hood just below the windshield wiper
arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, underneath
the air inlet grille.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
Climate Control System. Like your engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically to
ensure system performance. For information on how
often to change the passenger compartment air
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
7. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
8. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
For the type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
4. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to center.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-51.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically.
Uplevel 3400 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version with ABS and Traction Control shown, Canada similar
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uplevel 3800 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version with ABS and Traction Control shown, Canada similar
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uplevel 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine Cluster: United States version with ABS and Traction Control shown,
Canada similar
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the button is pressed and held for longer than
1.5 seconds while in the odometer mode, it will have
no effect.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in either miles (used in the United States)
or in kilometers (used in Canada).
Your trip odometer will work no matter what position
your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Tachometer
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you
see ERROR, you’ll know someone has probably
tampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
But if it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON, a chime will come on
for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
Trip Odometer
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
Your trip odometer tells how far you have driven since
you last reset it.
Your trip/select reset switch will go back and forth
between the odometer and the trip odometer if the button
is pressed and released within 1.5 seconds. If the button
is pressed and held for longer than 1.5 seconds while in
the trip odometer mode, it will be reset to zero.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voltmeter Gage
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If your vehicle is equipped
with the 3800 V6 engine
it has a voltmeter gage that
indicates battery voltage.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
The LOW BRAKE FLUID message in the message
center will also appear when there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
If the gage reads less than 12 volts or more than
16 volts while the engine is running, and it stays
there, you may have a problem with the electrical
charging system.
Also, when your gage reads less than 11 volts or
more than 16 volts, your battery life indicator will be
illuminated in the message center. For more information
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If your vehicle has ABS,
the anti-lock brake system
warning light will come
on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition key
to ON.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Brake System
on page 4-34.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs
service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If your vehicle has
the traction control
system, this warning light
may come on for the
following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC
OFF button located on the center console, a
chime will sound and the warning light will come on
and stay on. To turn the system back on, press
the button again. The warning light should go off.
more information.
United States - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
United States - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
• If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
Canada - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
Canada - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During the majority of the operation, the
gage will read 210°F (100°C) or less.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for
the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250°F
(122°C) mark. When the gage reads greater than 250°F
(122°C), the HOT COOLANT TEMP light will be
illuminated in the message center and a chime will
sound continuously. If the gage reaches the 260°F
(125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is
working beyond its capacity.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the Light Is On Steady
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure indicator
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
tells you if you have the
correct oil pressure in
your engine to operate
your vehicle.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if
your battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days of
routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
3800 V6 Engine
Under normal conditions the indicator should read
slightly above the half way point.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your oil pressure falls too low, the indicator will read
at the low setting and you should have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control. See
page 3-11.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Highbeam On Light
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
Fuel Gage
The gage will first indicate empty before you are
out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
Here are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
United States - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
United States - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or accelerating.
Message Center
The message center is located below the tachometer
gage on the instrument panel cluster. It gives you
important safety and maintenance facts.
Canada - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
Canada - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Traction System Warning
Message
Traction Active Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
If your vehicle is equipped with the traction control
system, this message will stay on a few seconds after
the traction system stops limiting wheel spin.
If your vehicle is equipped with the traction control
system and this message appears when you are driving,
there is a problem with your traction control system
and your vehicle is in need of service.
This message will appear when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin.
When this message is displayed, the system will not
limit wheel spin. The message will stay on for
60 seconds. Four chimes will also be heard. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you
that your traction control system is not working properly.
Be sure to have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Warning Message
Hot Coolant Temperature Warning
Message
When the vehicle is
started this message
will be displayed for
three seconds.
If the message is displayed when the engine is running,
you may have a problem with your charging system.
If there is a problem with the charging system, four
chimes will sound when the message comes on. The
battery display will also stay on while the key is in
ON until the engine is started.
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when the cooling
system temperature gets hot. A chime will sound
continuously, also.
Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or
some other charging system problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving with this message on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Oil Pressure Message
Low Engine Oil Level Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when the engine oil pressure
is low. A chime will sound continuously, also. See
Your vehicle may be equipped with a LOW ENG OIL
LEVEL message.
This message is displayed for 60 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle when the engine oil level is low.
Four chimes will also sound.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you
that your engine oil level is low. Be sure to have your
vehicle serviced right away.
level and for what type of oil to add.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Message
Low Tire Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
When this message comes on, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. It will appear for 60 seconds.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the tire pressure
system which monitors the inflation pressure of the tires.
After the system has “learned” the tire pressure with
properly inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE
message will be displayed and four warning chimes will
sound if the tire pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi
(83 kPa) lower than the other three tires.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message must be reset. Until it is
reset, this message will be displayed for 60 seconds
each time you start the engine. For more information on
resetting the system, see “How to Reset the Change
When you have checked the tire pressures, be sure to
reset the tire inflation monitor. See “Tire Pressure
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door Ajar Warning Message
Trunk Ajar Warning Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This message will appear if one of the doors is not
completely closed and the ignition is in ON.
This message will appear if the trunk is not completely
closed and the ignition is in ON.
If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you will
also hear four chimes.
If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you will
also hear four chimes.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Message
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This message is displayed to monitor the Passlock®
system.
This message is displayed when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid.
If the security message is displayed continuously while
driving and stays on, there may be a problem with
the Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not be protected
by Passlock® and you should see your dealer for
information.
The message is only displayed for 60 seconds at the
start of each ignition cycle. For more information
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you
that your washer fluid is low. Be sure to refill the washer
fluid tank right away.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Fuel Warning Message
Low Brake Fluid Warning Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on
fuel. Four chimes will also sound.
This message will be displayed when your vehicle has a
brake problem. The brake system warning light will
also be illuminated.
Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
If this message appears, the brakes aren’t working
properly. You should have your vehicle serviced
page 3-34 for more information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Vehicle Soon Message
Highbeam Out Warning Message
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
This message will come on if you have engine problems.
If this message appears, you may have a problem with
your high-beam headlamps.
These problems may not be obvious and may not
affect vehicle performance or durability. Consult a
qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain
top vehicle performance.
The message will stay on about 60 seconds. When the
ignition is turned off, this message will be displayed
again for three seconds to remind you that you
may have a problem with your highbeam-headlamps.
Be sure to check your bulbs right away and replace
them if necessary.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the display to a metric or English reading,
press the RESET and MODE buttons at the same time.
Hold them down for three seconds and the display
will change. A chime will be heard to confirm the
new selection.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The reset button can also be used to manually calibrate
the compass. See “Manual Compass Calibration”
later in this section.
The reset button can be used to set the compass
zone variation. See “Compass Variance” later in
this section.
MODE: Press this button to cycle through three modes
of operation: Off, Compass/Temperature and Trip
Computer mode.
• Off: No driver information is displayed in this mode
Optional Sunroof Version Shown
of operation.
If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, it will show
information about the vehicle and the surroundings. It is
located in the headliner between the sun visors.
• Compass/Temperature Mode: One of
eight compass readings and the outside
temperature are displayed. If the temperature is
below 38°F (3°C), the word ICE is displayed for
two minutes.
RESET: You can reset the AVG ECON, FUEL USED
or AVG SPEED trip computer modes by pressing
and holding this button for three seconds while you are
in the mode you wish to reset. A chime will sound to
confirm that your requested change has been made and
all the segments of the display will briefly light up.
• Trip Computer: Pressing the MODE button cycles
through the five displays. Press the MODE button
after the last Trip Computer display to return
the DIC to the OFF mode.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
zone number and VAR will be displayed. Press the
MODE button until the proper variance zone number on
the map is shown. Press the RESET button to set
the new variance zone and resume normal operation.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough to cause the
compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the
compass variance must be set.
All the display segments will be illuminated briefly
to acknowledge the change in zone number. A chime
will sound to confirm that the new zone number
has been set.
Setting the Variance
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the calibration process may not be complete. In
these cases CAL will be displayed, and all segments of
the compass will be illuminated where the compass
reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large
metal objects, make one to two 360° turns. The
calibration symbol will turn off and the compass reading
will be displayed.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET button
for about five seconds. The last entered variance
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Compass Calibration
Trip Computer
There are five trip computer displays which may be
stepped through by pushing the MODE button.
The information will appear in the following order:
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the
compass into the calibration mode.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows
Compass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET button
for at least 10 seconds until the calibration symbol
appears and all segments of the compass display are
illuminated. A chime will sound to confirm that the
calibration mode is active. Release the button and
complete two or three 360° turns in an area free from
large metal objects. The calibration symbol will turn
off and the compass reading will be displayed. A chime
will sound to verify that the calibration is complete.
the average fuel economy since the last reset.
INST ECON (Instantaneous Fuel Economy): This
shows fuel economy for the most recent second
of driving.
RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimated
distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.
The fuel economy used to calculate range is based
on the last few hours of driving. When in a low
fuel condition, LO is displayed.
Error Displays
FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows the
accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
• An error of the speed sensor or fuel sender will
cause -E- to be displayed.
• In the absence of vehicle communications,
a dash - - is displayed.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows the
average speed since the last reset.
If one of these error messages appear, see your
GM dealer.
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold the RESET button for at least
three seconds. The reset is acknowledged with all
segments of the display lit briefly and a chime. A reset
can only be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and
AVG SPEED displays. Each setting must be reset
individually.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time
Audio System(s)
Press and hold the HR or MN buttons for two seconds.
The clock symbol will appear on the display. Then
press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM or PM will appear for morning or evening
hours. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. The time can be set with the
ignition on or off.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold HR and MN at the same time for two seconds until
UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the
display. If the time is not available from the station,
NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with Cassette
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk,
and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital
quality audio and text information that includes song
title and artist name. A service fee is required in order
to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until OFF
appears on the display.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is off, press this knob to display
the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY,
and the name of the program (if available).
Finding a Station
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob
while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,
Channel Number/Channel Name.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
q PSCAN r (Preset Scan): Press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Then turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
The radio will only scan the preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
appears on the display.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to take you to the PTY’s
first station.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and the
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button twice to display the PTY and go
to another station.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last tuned station.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. The last message can be viewed until
a new message is received or the station is changed.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a cassette tape is playing. If a cassette tape is playing,
play will stop during the announcement. Alert
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TRAF will appear on the display. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the EJT
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the EJT button or
the DISPL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. A tape symbol will
appear on the display when a tape is inserted.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
While the tape is playing, use VOL, TUNE, SEEK, and
PSCAN controls just as you do for the radio. The
tape symbol and an arrow showing which side of the
tape is playing will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on
the tape. If you press this pushbutton more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the
tape. SEEK and a positive number will appear on
the display.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The station frequency and REV will
appear on the display. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape reverses.
Select stations during reverse operation using TUNE
and the SEEK arrows.
q SEEK r: The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
seek to work. The left arrow is the same as the PREV
pushbutton and the right arrow is the same as the NEXT
pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the tape.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Press the pushbutton again
to return to playing speed. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Select stations during forward
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The inactive tape will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
operation using TUNE and the SEEK arrows.
TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
cassette tape when listening to the radio. The tape
symbol will appear on the display when a tape is loaded.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape.
Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the cassette is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure the
player is working properly.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with the cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on the tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio off.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
2. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display,
indicating the feature is active.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the EJT
button is pressed.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast
to coast channels including music, news, sports,
talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital
quality audio and text information that includes song
title and artist name. A service fee is required in order
to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options are
station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name
of the program (if available).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep and
the selected display will now be the default.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until OFF appears on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
q PSCAN r (Preset Scan): Press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep. The radio will
go to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
The radio will only scan the preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
appears on the display.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select the PTY and to
take you to the PTY’s first station.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and the
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then
to go to another station.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will appear on the display.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
must be returned to the dealer for service.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TRAF will appear on the display. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will appear
on the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the EJT button or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or the
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display. To
change the default on the display, track or elapsed time,
press the knob until you see the display you want,
then hold the knob for two seconds. The radio
will produce one beep and the selected display will now
be the default.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with Cassette and CD
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk,
and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital
quality audio and text information that includes song
title and artist name. A service fee is required in order
to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until OFF appears on the display.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Finding a Station
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): For RDS, press this knob to change
what appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY, and the name of the program (if available).
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob
while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
q PSCAN r (Preset Scan): Press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
the first preset station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Then turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1, or XM2.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
appears on the display.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the AUDIO
knob to move the sound toward the right or the left
speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and the
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then
to go to another station.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
the selected PTY and traffic announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired PTY, NONE will
appear on the display and the radio will return to the last
station you were listening to.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press the INFO button. A
new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The last message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view the last
message until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display.
You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is
low or a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette
tape or CD is playing, play will stop during the
announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibrate Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TRAF will appear on the display. If no station
is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Return your
vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape or a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from 3 to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending upon the position on the tape.
If pressed when the current selection has been playing
for more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the current selection.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the EJT
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the EJT button or
the DISPL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
While the tape is playing, use VOL, TUNE, SEEK, and
PSCAN controls just as you do for the radio. TAPE
and an arrow will appear on the display to show which
side of the tape is playing.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. If this pushbutton is pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the
display. To forward through each selection press the
right SEEK arrow.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The station frequency and REV will
appear on the display and the radio will play while
the tape reverses. Press this pushbutton again to return
to playing speed. You may select stations during
reverse operation using the TUNE knob and the
SEEK arrows.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z EJT (Eject): Press this button, located next to
the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is
pressed first.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display and the radio will play while
the tape advances. Press the pushbutton again to return
to playing speed. You may select stations during
forward operation using the TUNE knob and the
SEEK arrows.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play because of one of
the following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure the
player is working properly.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
q SEEK r: If the right or the left arrow is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
forward or backward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive or a negative number will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition or the radio
off, first press the EJT button or the DISPL knob.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
CD Adapter Kits
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on the tape player.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display,
indicating the feature is active.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
The override feature will remain active until EJT is
pressed.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will appear
on the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If his pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times
the normal playing speed. ET and the elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display. To
change the default on the display, track or elapsed time,
press the knob until you see the display you want,
then hold the knob for two seconds. The radio
will produce one beep and the selected display will now
be the default.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
this pushbutton for more than two seconds to advance
at 17 times the normal playing speed. ET and the
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or a CD is playing. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
a CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Z EJT (Eject): Press this button, located next to
the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated
with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be
loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is
pressed first.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Messages
Theft-Deterrent Feature
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on
the display.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
When the ignition is off and RAP is not active, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up or
the down arrow to fast forward or reverse.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
SEEK by TYPE: Press this button to go to a station
with the last selected PTY and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display, if it is not already showing. If a
station with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will
return to the original station. If both SEEK by TYPE
and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with
the selected PTY and traffic announcements.
PRESET: Press this button to play the stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The
radio will go to the first preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go to the next preset station. Press this
button again to stop scanning. The radio will only
scan preset stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
MODE: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Press this button to listen to the radio when a cassette
tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Press and holding either arrow for three seconds to scan
the radio stations programmed on the preset
pushbuttons. The radio will go to the first preset station,
play for a few seconds, then go to the next preset
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound.
The radio will only seek or scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
w VOL x (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Reception
AM
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The broken tape detection feature of the cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX or the TAPE CD
button for five seconds. READY will appear on
the display and a cassette symbol will flash
for five seconds.
Care of Your CDs
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken
tape detection feature will be active again.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care
must be taken when cleaning the rear window because
it breaks in the resistive material heating element
and will adversely affect radio and defogger
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with
sharp objects.
performance. See your dealer for details.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back
to the default or normal setting, press and hold
pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from
the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the
new volume selected. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Vehicle Customization Settings
The audio system can be used to control vehicle
customization settings using the DISPL knob when the
for more information.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in
a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time
to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
you start your vehicle.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
Traction Control System (TCS)
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control System
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transaxle and apply the front brakes to
limit wheel spin.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this by
pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
United States
Canada
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze
the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear
or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do
have anti-lock, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
This light will come on when your Traction Control
System is limiting wheel spin. See Traction Active
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-41.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
To turn the system on or
off, press the TRAC OFF
button on the console.
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 2-20.
When the system is on,
this warning light will come
on to let you know if
there’s a problem.
When you turn the system off, a chime will sound and
the Traction Control System warning light will come
on and stay on. If the Traction Control System is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button to turn the
system off, the warning light will come on and the
system will turn off right away.
page 3-36. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Traction Control System
warning light should go off.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Traction Control
System on. But you can turn the system off if you
ever need to.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places. You can
lose control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space
if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are
no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes
to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are
rolling, you will have steering control.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Driving at Night
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-59.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Freeway Driving
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has a traction control system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under
certain conditions, you may want to turn the traction
control system off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. If you do have anti-lock
page 4-6. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have the anti-lock braking system or not,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you
would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes, if you
feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes
a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the
most traction you can.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock brakes, if you
brake so hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just
slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and
you can still steer.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has traction control, you should turn your
traction control system off. See Traction Control
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, you
may need to be towed out. If you do need to be
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
Tire and Loading Information Label
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
Example 1
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
page 4-36 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Certification Label
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread
it out. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (75 kg) in
your trunk.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else
are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dolly Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-21.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weigh-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes
so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Do not try to tap into
your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
page 2-27. Dirt and water can, too.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need additional
wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Driving On Grades
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
If you have overdrive, you may want to drive in
THIRD (3), instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-32.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-71
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-11.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use only premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane of 91 or higher. In an emergency,
you may be able to use a lower octane — as low as
87 — if heavy knocking does not occur. Refill your tank
with premium fuel as soon as possible. Otherwise,
you might damage your engine. If you are using
91 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the
Gasoline Octane
Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at
If your vehicle has the 3400 V6 engine (VIN Code E) or
the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use regular
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.
If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill
is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If
you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-37.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle
located inside the
vehicle near the
parking brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-43.
page 5-34.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
page 5-49.
K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
D. Upper Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood
Fuse Block (Upper)” under Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-102.
L. Engine Coolant Air Bleed Valves (underneath engine
shield). See “How to Add Coolant to the Radiator”
E. Lower Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood
Fuse Block (Lower)” under Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-102.
M. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-26.
on page 5-32.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-34.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 (Code K) engine, you will see the following:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-43.
page 5-34.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
on page 5-49.
K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
D. Upper Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood
Fuse Block (Upper)” under Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-102.
L. Engine Coolant Air Bleed Valves (underneath engine
shield). See “How to Add Coolant to the Radiator”
E. Lower Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood
Fuse Block (Lower)” under Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-102.
M. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-26.
on page 5-32.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-34.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
page 5-42.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 Supercharged (Code 1) engine, you will see the following:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-43.
page 5-34.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
on page 5-49.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
on page 5-102.
K. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-26.
on page 5-32.
L. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
on page 5-34.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (below generator).
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
3400 V6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
3800 V6 Engine
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-104.
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
page 3-46. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, use
one of the following procedures:
Using the Radio
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON, with the radio off.
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP knob on the
radio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS
is displayed.
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrow to scroll
through the main menu.
4. Scroll until OIL LIFE appears on the display.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
6. Press the TUNE DISP knob to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will
be displayed for one second.
7. Once the indicator has been reset, scroll until EXIT
appears on the display.
8. Press the TUNE DISP knob to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify the exit.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
9. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
Using the Accelerator Pedal
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message flashes, the system is reset.
However, if it stays on, it did not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
Supercharger Oil
Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper
tools, you should let your dealer perform this
maintenance.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park the vehicle on a level
surface. Check oil only
when the engine is
cold. Allow the engine to
cool two to three hours
after running.
When to Check
Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every
36 months, whichever occurs first.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
How to Check and Add Oil
{CAUTION:
1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before
If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug
while the engine is hot, pressure may cause
hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole. You may
be burned. Do not remove the plug until the
engine cools.
removing it.
2. Remove the oil fill plug.
3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the
bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.
4. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place.
Tighten to 88 lb in (10 Y).
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
1. Loosen the two clips on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing and lift the filter cover tabs
out of the housing.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See
page 6-13.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
slots on the housing. A notch on the sides of the
filter cover will indicate the correct engagement.
Reinstall the two clips on the top of the housing
when you are finished.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
{CAUTION:
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter
at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may
have to drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check the
transaxle fluid.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transaxle fluid dipstick
handle is the black loop
near the rear of the engine
compartment, toward
the center. See Engine
page 5-12 for more
3. Check both sides
of the dipstick, and
read the lower
level. The fluid level
must be in the
cross-hatched area.
information on location.
3400 V6 engine shown,
3800 V6 and
3800 V6 Supercharged
engines similar
3400 V6 engine shown,
3800 V6 and
3800 V6 Supercharged
engines similar
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The coolant recovery tank
is located between the
power steering fluid
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
reservoir and the
underhood fuse block in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
mark or a little higher. When your engine is warm,
the level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-32.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle, near the diagonal cross brace. See Engine
information on location.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning
message about a hot engine on your instrument
panel cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
An overheat warning along with a low coolant message
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The low coolant light may come on
and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-18.
3400 V6 engine
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant recovery tank is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
page 5-12.
3800 V6 engine shown,
3800 V6 Supercharged engine similar
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To check the coolant level, look for the COLD mark on
the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be at or above the COLD mark on the coolant
recovery tank. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-34 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, remove the
3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access
the bleed valve.
3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube
and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill
tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise
and remove it.
3.2. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide
the catch tab out of the engine bracket and
remove the cover shield.
3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the
valve cover oil fill hole until you are ready to
replace the cover shield.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed
valve or valves.
3400 V6 Bleed Valve #1
3400 V6 Bleed Valve #2
3800 Series II V6 Bleed Valve
3400 V6 engine: There are two bleed valves. The
first is located on the thermostat housing. The
second is located on the thermostat bypass tube,
on top of the water pump housing.
3800 V6 engine: There is one bleed valve. It is
located on the thermostat housing.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, replace the
3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.
7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield
under the bracket on the engine.
7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield over the
hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and
cap by twisting clockwise.
5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valves after the radiator is filled.
6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD mark.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT
mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark
when the engine is cold.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering
fluid reservoir is located
toward the rear of the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
on page 5-12 for
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
reservoir location.
11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrow on the pressure cap lines up properly.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
When the 3400 V6 engine compartment is hot, the level
should be at the H (hot) mark. When it is cold, the
level should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, you should add fluid.
For the 3800 V6 engine, the level should be at the HOT
mark when the engine compartment is hot. If the fluid
is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
United States
Canada
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
When this message is displayed in the message center,
it means the vehicle is low on windshield washer
fluid. You should add more windshield washer fluid
soon. See Low Washer Fluid Warning Message
on page 3-48 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of
{CAUTION:
the reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-49 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
location.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose. The remote
positive (+) terminal is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,
next to the upper underhood fuse block. See
more information on location.
To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, lift the
plastic cap. You should always use the remote
positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+)
terminal on the battery.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location of the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe
your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend
that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
and remove the electrical connector.
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access to
the bulbs.
6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from
the retaining ring by pulling it away from the
headlamp assembly.
7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
C. Parking/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lamp
8. Install the electrical connector to the new bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab on
the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn clockwise
until it stops.
for more information.
2. Remove the air baffle.
3. Remove the two headlamp fasteners by pulling up
on them.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps
for more information.
2. Remove the nut and convenience net, if your
vehicle has one, unhook the net from the upper
wing nut.
3. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.
4. Unscrew the two remaining hex nuts.
5. Pull the assembly from the body carefully.
6. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise
and pull it out.
7. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it.
8. Push the new bulb into the socket.
9. Push the socket back into the assembly.
Tighten the socket by turning it clockwise.
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Taillamp/Stoplamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
10. Reinstall the assembly and the two lower hex nuts.
Make sure that the wires are not pinched between
the body of the vehicle and the mounting screws.
11. Reinstall the carpeting.
12. Reinstall the upper (convenience net) wing nut and
reattach convenience net, if equipped.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-Up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.
Back-Up
921
3357NAK or
3457NAK
1. Remove the two screws from the back-up
lamp assembly.
Front Park/Turn Signal
2. Pull the assembly from the rear bumper.
Front Sidemarker Lamps
Headlamps, High-Beam
Headlamps, Low-Beam
Rear Sidemarker Lamps
194
3. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise
and pull it out.
9005
9006
168
4. Pull the old bulb out. Do not twist it.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket.
Taillamps/Stoplamps/Turn Signal 3057
6. Push the socket back into the assembly.
Tighten the socket by turning it clockwise.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
you dealer.
7. Reinstall the assembly with the two screws.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield
page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-13. Here’s how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Turn on the wipers to the LO wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the old blade assembly
down toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into place.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
{CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Inflation - Tire Pressure
• Needless damage from road hazards
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-86.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle has been
If your vehicle has the tire pressure monitor system, it
can alert you to a large change in the pressure of
one tire. The system “learns” the pressure at each tire
throughout the operating speed range of your vehicle.
The system normally takes between 45 and 90 minutes
of driving to learn the tire pressures. This time may
be longer depending on your individual driving habits.
Learning need not be accumulated during a single
trip. Once learned, the system will remember the tire
pressures until the system is recalibrated.
sitting for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
After the system has learned tire pressures with
properly inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE
message will come on if the pressure in one tire
becomes 12 psi (83 kPa) lower than the other
three tires. The tire pressure monitor system won’t
alert you if the pressure in more than one tire is low, if
the system is not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle
is moving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
The tire pressure monitor system detects differences
in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire
pressure. The system can alert you about a low
tire — but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes on,
you should stop as soon as you can and check all
your tires for damage. (If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes
four tires as soon as you can. See Inflation - Tire
To reset (calibrate) the system through the radio, do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON and turn the
radio off.
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISPL button on the
radio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS
is displayed.
The LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will also be
displayed (while the ignition is on) until you reset
(calibrate) the system.
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrow to scroll
through the main menu.
Don’t reset the tire pressure monitor system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset
the system when the tire pressures are incorrect,
the system will not work properly and may not alert you
when a tire is low.
4. Scroll until TIRE MON appears on the display.
5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
6. Press the TUNE DISPL button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will
be displayed for one second.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure, rotate your tires,
or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll
need to reset (calibrate) the tire pressure monitor
system. You’ll also need to reset the system whenever
you buy new tires and whenever the vehicle’s battery
has been disconnected.
7. Once the monitor has been reset, scroll until EXIT
appears on the display.
8. Press the TUNE DISPL button to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify exit.
The system completes the calibration process
during driving.
The tire pressure monitor system can be reset two ways.
To reset (calibrate) the system using the ignition, do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition position to ON.
2. Pull the exterior lamp control from the ON position
to the OFF position three times.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of driving
in each of three speed ranges to “learn” tire pressures.
The speed ranges are 15 to 40 mph (25 to 65 km/h),
40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h) and above 65 mph
(105 km/h). When learning is complete, the system will
alert you after two to eight minutes if a tire is 12 psi
(83 kPa) different from the other three tires. Detection
thresholds may be higher and detection times may
be longer on rough roads, curves and at high speeds.
The system is not capable of detection at speeds greater
than 70 mph (110 km/h).
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-72 for more information.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Inflation Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride and other things during normal service on your
vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for
mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
{CAUTION:
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P235/55R17 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE
Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 size tires, don’t
use tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is located in the trunk.
1. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it. Then
remove the cover.
3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
2. Remove the compact spare tire from the trunk. See
information about the compact spare.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have center caps if equipped with
aluminum wheels.
To remove the wheel
center cap, use the flat
end of the wheel wrench
and pry them off at the pry
off notch.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) extension
and protector/guide (B) and wheel wrench (C).
Do not drop the cap or lay it face down, as it could
become scratched or damaged. The wheel nuts
are hidden behind the center cap.
Your vehicle may be equipped with wheel covers.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the steel wheel
covers and wheel nut
caps, loosen the plastic nut
caps with the wheel
Once you have removed the wheel cover, center cap, or
wheel nut caps, use the following procedure to remove
the flat tire and install the spare tire.
wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.
If needed, you can
finish loosening them with
your fingers. The plastic
nut caps will not come off.
Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of the
wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay
it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged.
1. Turn the wheel wrench once on each wheel nut to
loosen them. Don’t remove them yet.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jack Placement – Front Tire
Jack Placement – Rear Tire
Locate the placement of where to put the jack,
using the diagram above, when a rear tire needs to
be changed. Use the notch (B) as a guide when
positioning the jack lift head (A) near the front edge
of the rear wheel opening (C).
2. Locate the placement of where to put the jack,
using the diagram above, when a front tire needs
to be changed. Use the bolts (A) as a guide
when positioning the jack lift head (C) near the rear
edge of the front wheel opening (B).
For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the
jack lift head about 4 inches (10 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel opening in the cutout of
the rocker panel molding.
For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put jack
lift head about 7.5 inches (19 cm) from the rear
edge of the front wheel opening in the cutout of the
rocker panel molding.
3. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well of the vehicle.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
7. Install the compact spare tire.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Reinstall the
wheel nuts with the
rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten
each nut by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
sequence as shown.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire in the trunk. Use the
following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
Do not try to put the wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension and
protector guide located in the foam holder to help
prevent wheel surface damage.
A. Retainer
B. Cover
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Nut
To store a full-size tire, do the following:
1. Place the tire in the trunk, valve stem facing down
with the protector/guide through a wheel bolt hole.
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
2. Remove the protector/guide and attach the retainer
securely. The cover will not fit over a full-size tire,
so be sure to store the cover as far forward as
possible.
G. Extension and
Protective Guide
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
3. Replace the protector/guide back in the foam
holder when you put the compact spare tire back
in the trunk.
4. Put the cover back over the compact spare tire and
tighten the center nut.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must
calibrate the tire inflation monitor system after installing
or removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure
correctly when the compact spare is installed on the
vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a
full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last
longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Gasoline
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
• Benzene
• Naphtha
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Paint Thinner
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if
stains are stubborn.
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage the
vehicle:
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
• Alcohol
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white
cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should
not drip water.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
This may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass Surfaces
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-90.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Windshield and Wiper Blades
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Cleaner Wax
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Odor Eliminator
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find
the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
A circuit breaker in the driver’s side instrument panel
fuse block protects the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp circuit is protected by individual fuses in
the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the fuse to blow. If this happens, have your
headlamp system checked right away.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Driver’s Side Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Some fuses are in a fuse
block at the end of the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle. Pull off the cover
labeled FUSES to
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
expose the fuses.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
PCM/BCM/
CLSTR
Powertrain Control Module, Body
Control Module, Cluster (Ignition 0)
Windshield Wipers, Windshield
Washer
WPR
PCM (CRANK) Powertrain Control Module (Crank)
CIG/AUX
BCM
AIRBAG
Accommodated Device (Accessory)
Body Control Module (Accessory)
Airbagt System
Anti-Lock Brake System, Powertrain
Control Module, Brake Switch,
Crank Relay, Canister Vent Solenoid
(Run, Crank)
ABS/PCM
Brake Lamps, Body Control Module
(Run, Crank)
STOP
TRN/SIG
CRUISE
Turn Signal Flashers
Cruise Control Steering Column
Controls
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
RAP
HEADLAMP
Usage
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Headlamp Relay
HVAC Temp Door Motors & Module,
Cruise Control Module
AC/CRUISE
A/C FAN
STR COL
HVAC Blower
Steering Wheel Lighting
Body Control Module, Door Lock
Controls
Circuit
Breakers
RETAINED
ACCSRY
PWR BRKR
Usage
DR/LK
PWR MIR
CLSTR/BCM
Power Mirrors
Power Windows, Sunroof Breaker
Cluster, Body Control Module, Data
Link Connector (Battery)
LH HTD/
ST/BCM
Driver’s Heated Seat, Body Control
Module, Battery controlled Loads
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger’s Side Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block at the end of the
instrument panel on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Pull off the
cover labeled FUSES to
expose the fuses.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
RH HTD ST
PWR DROP
B/U LP
Usage
Passenger Heated Seat
Accommodated Device
Back-Up Lamps
Driver Information Center, Remote
Keyless Entry, HVAC
Relays
PARK
LP RELAY
BACK UP
LP RELAY
BATT RUN
DOWN
PROTECTION
RELAY
Usage
Parking Lamp Relay
Back-up Lamps Relay
DIC/RKE
Battery Run Down Protection Relay
Rear Defogger Relay, Heated
TRK/
ROOF BRP
HVAC BLO
Trunk Lamps, Headliner Lamps
HVAC Blower Relay
Instrument Panel Footwell Lamps,
Glovebox Lamps
REAR
DEFOG RELAY Mirror Relay
I/P BRP
HTD MIR
BRK SW
HAZ SW
Heated Mirrors
Brake Switch
Hazard Switch
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
PWR
SEATS BRKR
REAR
DEFOG BRKR
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Defogger Breaker
REAR PRK LP Rear Parking Lamps
AUX PWR
C/LTR
Accessory Power Outlet (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter
Radio, Radio Amplifier, Remote
Digital Radio Receiver
RADIO
Front Parking Lamps,
Instrumentation Lighting
FRT PARK LP
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Upper Fuse Block
Fuses
LEFT I/P
Usage
Left Fuse Block
Right Fuse Block (Battery)
Right Fuse Block (Battery)
Underhood (Top) Fuse Block
Horn Relay
RT I/P #1
RT I/P #2
U/HOOD #1
HORN RLY
BLANK
Some fuses are in a fuse block in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
Blank
BLANK
Blank
FOG RLY
F/PMP RLY
Fog Lamps Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
Low (Left Front) & High
(Left Front) Headlamps
DRL/EXT LTS
Low (Right Front) & High
(Right Front) Headlamps
EXT LTS
PCM
PCM Battery
HVAC Compressor Relay &
Generator
A/C RLY (CMPR)
Relays
FUEL PUMP
FOG LTS
Usage
Fuel Pump
Fog Lamps
CRANK RLY
DRL RELAY
HORNS
Starter (Crank) Relay
Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
BLOWER MOTOR HVAC Blower Motor
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
U/HOOD #2
COOLING FANS Cooling fans (Battery)
FAN
CONT #2 & #3
Ignition Relay, AIR Pump
Some fuses are in a fuse block in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
Relays #2 & #3
FAN CONT #1
FUEL INJ
Cooling Fan Control Relays #1
Fuel Injectors
TRANS SOL
Transmission Solenoids
A/C RLY (COIL) HVAC Control Relay
Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass Air
Flow Sensor (MAF), AIR Pump
Relay & Valve Control
ENG DEVICES
DFI MDL
Direct Fire Ignition Module
Oxygen Sensors
(Pre and Post Converter)
OXY SEN
Relays
Usage
Secondary Cooling Fan
(Passenger’s Side)
Cooling Fan Control Relay
Primary Cooling Fan
(Driver’s Side)
FAN CONT #3
FAN CONT #2
FAN CONT #1
Fuses
IGN SW
RT I/P #3
Usage
Ignition Switch
Rear Defogger, Audio System
IGN RLY
A/C CMPR
Ignition Relay
HVAC Compressor
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
2.3 lbs
1.0 kg
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement
After Complete Overhaul
When draining/replacing converter, more fluid may
be needed.
7.4 quarts
10.0 quarts
7.0 L
9.5 L
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3400 V6 Engine
11.3 quarts
11.7 quarts
11.7 quarts
10.7 L
11.0 L
11.0 L
3800 V6 Engine
3800 Supercharged V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3400 V6 Engine
4.0 quarts
4.5 quarts
4.5 quarts
3.8 L
4.2 L
4.2 L
3800 V6 Engine
3800 Supercharged V6 Engine
Fuel Tank
17.0 gallons
64.3 L
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3400 V6
VIN Code
Transaxle
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
E
K
1
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
3800 V6
3800 Supercharged V6
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the change engine oil message appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter.
See footnotes † and (m).
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter (if equipped). See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
page 5-25. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
•
•
Supercharger service (if equipped).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (l).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a
pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console
door and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(l) For supercharged engines only: Check the
supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger
oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs
page 6-12.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-29 for further details.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If
page 5-76.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
necessary.
on page 2-24 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power
Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Automatic
Transaxle
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Key Lock
Cylinders
Supercharger Oil
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345982,
in Canada 10953513). See
Supercharger
Engine Oil
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
page 5-18.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-29.
Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Hood and
Door Hinges
Brake System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
AC Delco
Part Number
Part
GM Part Number
10351258
24206433
Automatic Transaxle Filter
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
10351258
25010792
10340216
12568387
A1614C
PF47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF132
41-101
Windshield Wiper Blades (Shepherd’s Hook Type)
22 inches (56.0 cm)
10350320
8-T22
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® ⟨243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
Roadside Assistance Program
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Description of the problem.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone
call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may
be available for the use of public transportation such
as a taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses of
up to a five-day maximum may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
GM dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your GM dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Owner’s Information
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-90
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-16
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-17
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-17
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-72
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-28
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
